JP7470528B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Conventional gaming machines are capable of simultaneously executing a battle effect and a timer effect as reach effects, and some are also capable of executing a slow-motion effect during the battle effect, which slows down the playback speed of the battle effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-99801 A

However, in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in terms of slow motion effects.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can impress upon the player that the gaming machine is controlled in an advantageous state .

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
determining whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
The display means can be used to variably display decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information,
A predetermined reach can be executed using the display means,
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined reach is
A reach in which a predetermined effect video is displayed on the display means,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The predetermined effect video is a video in which the effect progresses at a predetermined speed by changing the effect image at the predetermined speed,
The predetermined speed includes a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed,
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the first speed can be displayed during the first period, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the second speed can be displayed during the second period, and the predetermined effect video of a first predetermined scene to be controlled to the advantageous state can be displayed at the second speed during the third period,
When the second command is received, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the first speed can be displayed during the first period, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the second speed can be displayed during the second period, and the predetermined effect video of a second predetermined scene not controlled to the advantageous state can be displayed at the first speed during the third period,
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A special effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
In the display means , a pseudo-movable object display effect can be executed in which the special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from a special first display position to a special second display position, and the special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the special first display position to the special second display position,
A movable body performance in which the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position can be executed,
The light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
In the second period, the light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than that of the first period,
The display means includes:
When the special pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the special first display position to the special second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the special second display position to the special first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the special second display position;
When the special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display can be moved and displayed from the special first display position to the special second display position, and then moved and displayed from the special second display position to the special first display position, and then hidden.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to impress upon the player that the game is being controlled in an advantageous manner.
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character;
a pseudo movable body display means for moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A movable body effect execution means capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and an effect relating to the movable body;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting background music (music) and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the effect video of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the effect sound including the music and the sound effects can increase the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only move and display the pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and are unable to enhance the interest of the effects. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a pseudo movable body display means for moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A movable body effect execution means capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and an effect related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
The present invention is characterized in that when the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a specified period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the specified period.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing the rotating display of the hold display in each hold display area, (C) is a diagram showing the moving display of the caption in the caption display area, and (D) is a diagram showing the blinking pattern of the fourth pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram showing the execution decision rate of chance-up effects. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation form of the second reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of final effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of final effect. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

The following describes an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention.

[form]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the BGM and the sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The sound output means is characterized by including a playback circuit (e.g., voice synthesis IC 079SG132) that plays back sound, an amplifier circuit (e.g., amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound played back by the playback circuit, and a speaker (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) that outputs the sound amplified by the amplifier circuit.
According to this feature, highly reproducible sound effects can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of aspect 3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting, by the sound output means, a speed related to the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance during a predetermined period in the second period at the same speed as that during the first period, and is capable of outputting by the sound output means at a speed different from that during the first period during a specific period after the predetermined period in the second period (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-1, during the first half of the execution periods of the second half portions of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as during the first half portion execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while during the second half of the execution periods of the second half portions of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, performance sounds are output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5 slower than the playback speed V4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed of the presentation sound can be made different for a specific period during the second period in which the presentation video is displayed at the second speed, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The sound effects corresponding to the predetermined effects include music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting background music (music) and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment value of the game can be increased by the sound effects including music and sound effects.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
A light-emitting means (e.g., a play effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light at least in the first period and the second period and capable of changing a light-emitting mode is provided;
The effect execution means is capable of changing the light emitting state of the light emitting means in a cycle shorter than that of the first period during the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half of the execution period of the second reach effect and the second half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a cycle shorter than that of each of the execution periods of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the third reach effect and the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period of change in the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progression of the presentation is slower, thereby improving the presentation effect in the second period.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) that displays a performance video of a character in the first display area and outputs a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character, and an information performance that operates an information display related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
Regarding the information presentation, in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to execute information presentation that operates the information display at the same operation speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period and the latter half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the rotation display of the reserved display is displayed at a rotation speed V3, and the moving display of the telop is displayed at a moving speed V3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the operation speed of the information display and the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation do not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display region 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined presentation rather than the information presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6 or aspect 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing information effect that always operates the information display at the same operation speed at least during a period during which a variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, during a period other than during a reach effect, in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, rotation display of the reserved display is executed at a rotation speed V3, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, movement display of the telop is executed at a movement speed V3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating speed of the information display does not change, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to eighth aspects,
The information presentation includes a moving display presentation in which an information display suggesting a state related to the presentation in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved in the second display area (for example, a portion in which a moving display of a message according to a game state is executed in a telop display area 079SG005T),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect for moving the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), when the characters included in the message reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and the display ends, the characters are displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and are moved again from left to right).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, at least a portion of the information display is always visible to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize that a moving display effect is being executed.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that enhances the effect of the predetermined performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, a part in which an effect performance that displays a convergent line on the image display device 5 is executed during the second half execution period of the second reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the presentation effect of the second period is enhanced, and the effect presentation makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has ended and the notification presentation will be executed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
The effect presentation can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness in enhancing the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation (for example, a mode in which a convergent line is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) and a mode in which a greater number of convergent lines are displayed than in FIG. 10-28(C) as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)).
It is possible to execute the effect production in a mode in which the degree of effect of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially as the second period progresses from the start point to the end point (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28(D), the number of convergence lines increases as the battle production progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the mode of the effect presentation changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness for enhancing the presentation effect of the specified presentation increases sequentially, so that the effect presentation makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has ended and the notification presentation will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character in the first display area and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation, and a specific information presentation related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B) and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed, which is slower than the first speed, can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-26(G), Fig. 10-29(E), Fig. 10-30(D), Fig. 10-31(G), Fig. 10-35(C), when decorative symbols stop in a combination of jackpots as a jackpot notification effect, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, by executing the notification presentation in a wide display area combining the first and second display areas, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a bonus has been awarded.

A thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
A first display (e.g., a hold display) that operates in the second display area and a second display (e.g., a first hold memory display area 079SG005D and a second hold memory display area 079SG005U) that does not operate in the second display area can be displayed by the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area with the first display and the second display erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-26(G), Fig. 10-29(E), Fig. 10-30(D), Fig. 10-31(G), and Fig. 10-35(C), when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the reserved display, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-display and an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the notification display is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that is in operation but also the second display that is not in operation is erased, thereby further improving the visibility of the notification display in the second display area.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character in the first display area and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation, and an information presentation related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B) and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C));
Equipped with
The display means is capable of changing the visibility of the first display region and the second display region (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, a portion capable of reducing the visibility of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb in addition to the first display region 079SG005F),
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-36 and 10-37 as a modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by an effect image 079SG005Ea but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the change in visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing when the notification presentation is executed, and the absence of a change in visibility of the second display area prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation.

A fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourteenth aspect,
The display means includes an image generating means (e.g., a display control unit 123) capable of generating an image to be displayed, the image generating means having a plurality of drawing hierarchies including a first drawing hierarchical layer (e.g., second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a second drawing hierarchical layer (e.g., first image data) that is a higher drawing hierarchical layer than the first drawing hierarchical layer and capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area;
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image that the image generating means draws on the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by enlarging and displaying an effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as an image of the second image data).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

A sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The image generating means changes the visibility of the image drawn on the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer toward the area corresponding to the second display area over a predetermined period of time (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing an effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as an image of the second image data so as to be enlarged and displayed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period of time from a specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area, making it difficult for the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area to change.

A seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the fourteenth to sixteenth aspects,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The performance execution means includes:
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means (for example, a portion capable of notifying the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the player's operation of the push button 31B),
A motion prompting effect (e.g., an operation prompting effect) for prompting a player to perform an action by displaying a motion prompting image for performing the notification effect in the first display area is executable;
The visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance is reduced, but the visibility of the action prompting performance is not reduced (for example, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data is not reduced).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the action-promoting effect can be made to stand out in relation to the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to take action.

Aspect 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a performance video of a character in the first display area and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character, a notification performance that notifies the player whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the predetermined performance ends, and an information performance that operates an information display related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B) and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, a pre-notification performance (e.g., a still image display performance) can be executed to display a specific still image corresponding to the stop of the progress of the predetermined performance executed in the first display area,
The operation of displaying the information in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20 and 10-21, the rotation display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 10-2 (C) continue even during the still image display performance execution period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of a specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, by displaying a specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a notification presentation is being executed, and since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

A nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eighteenth aspect,
The specific still image is an image in which the color of the still image of the specified performance in which the progress has been stopped has been changed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-16 and Fig. 10-29 (A) to Fig. 10-29 (B), the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display performance in pattern SG-2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the specified effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that a notification effect is being executed.

A 20th aspect of the gaming machine according to the 19th aspect is
The color of the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, but the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation when the pre-notification presentation is executed (since the color of the image of the information presentation does not change, it is easy to recognize that it is a specific still image with a color change).

A twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twentieth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying the performance video (e.g., an image display device 5);
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation;
Equipped with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) subsequent to the first section,
The first section and the second section each include a first period (e.g., a first reach performance first half execution period, a second reach performance first half execution period, a third reach performance first half execution period, a fourth reach performance first half execution period) and a second period subsequent to the first period (e.g., a first reach performance second half execution period, a second reach performance second half execution period, a third reach performance second half execution period, a fourth reach performance second half execution period),
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period, a performance video in which the progression speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In the second period, an effect video at a second speed, which is slower than the first speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The specified presentation can be executed in a first pattern in which the first section is transitioned to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of Super Reach α3 shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21, and the variable display of Super Reach β3 shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25), and a second pattern in which the first section is ended without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-19, and the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specified presentation will be executed at the second speed in the first period and then move on to the second period, or whether the specified presentation will end without moving on to the second period, and whether the specified presentation will be executed at the second speed in the second period and a bonus will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
An end suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect will end in the first section without transitioning to the second section (for example, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during a first reach effect latter half execution period or a third reach effect latter half execution period) can be executed,
The end suggestion effect and a predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progression speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during a first reach effect latter half execution period or a third reach effect latter half execution period, and the first reach effect latter half execution period or the third reach effect latter half execution period are executed at a progression speed V1).
When notifying that a privilege will be granted in the notification performance, a performance animation having a third speed of progression during a first notification period of the notification performance can be displayed on the display means, and a performance animation having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means in a second notification period after the first notification period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), a portion in which a video of an enemy character falling down as a result of an attack by an ally character hitting the enemy character is displayed at a progression speed V2).
When notifying that a special benefit will not be given in the notification performance, the display means can display the performance video at the third speed during the second notification period without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(F) to 10-30(H), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), a portion in which a video of an ally character falling is displayed at a progression speed V1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the specified presentation progresses when the second section is entered is the same as the speed at which the end suggestion presentation progresses, so that it is possible to prevent the expectation of a bonus being awarded from being excessively heightened due to the speed at which the presentation progresses when the second section is entered being different from the speed at which the end suggestion presentation progresses, and when it is notified that a bonus will not be awarded, the fourth speed presentation video is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively dissatisfied, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
A motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, an action promotion presentation (e.g., an operation promotion presentation) for encouraging a player to take an action, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a loss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded based on detection of a player's action by the action detection means;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
When the effect video of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed during the second period, the action prompting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-24 and 10-25, during the latter half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the predetermined presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion presentation during the second period, the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation can be enhanced.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The action promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation succession period of the push button 31B) that notifies a valid detection period during which the action detection means accepts detection of the player's action,
When the valid detection period ends, the effect execution means can execute, from a timing after the timing when the valid detection period ends, the same notification effect as that when the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the valid detection period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-33(E), 10-34(E) and 10-35(A) to 10-35(F), a portion that executes the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the player operating the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification display will not be executed before the valid detection period has elapsed, thereby preventing the player from recognizing whether or not a bonus will be granted during the valid detection period because the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the predetermined presentation ends;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
When notifying that a benefit will be given in the notification performance, a performance video having a third speed during a first notification period of the notification performance can be displayed on the display means, and a performance video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed during a second notification period after the first notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, and 10-26 (E 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), during the jackpot notification performance, the animation of the part where the attack of the friendly character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progression speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed of V2.
When notifying that a bonus will not be awarded in the notification performance, the display means can display the performance video at the third speed during the second notification period without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(F) to 10-30(H), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), the part where the video of the loss notification performance is displayed at the progression speed V1).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified effect does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the awarding of a bonus is announced as a notification effect, a presentation video with a progression speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the presentation video of the notification effect can impress upon the player that a bonus has been awarded.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of a still image is inverted (still image display effect of pattern SG-2) as shown in Figure 10-16) during the second period only when a bonus is awarded.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special effect will be executed.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26,
The bonus granting means is capable of granting a first bonus (e.g., a non-variable jackpot game state) and a second bonus (e.g., a variable jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus,
The performance execution means can execute a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in modification 079SG-4) that notifies the player that a special benefit will be granted after first notifying the player that a special benefit will not be granted in the notification performance,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and the notification effect notifies the player that a special benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part that is controlled to a jackpot game state of a jackpot with a certain probability of winning).
When the special effect is executed during the second period and the notification effect notifies the player that no benefit will be awarded, and then the special effect is executed, the first benefit or the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the notification effect is executed once and then the revival effect is executed, there are cases where the game is controlled to a non-variable jackpot jackpot game state or a variable jackpot jackpot game state).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the notification effect will notify the player of the award of a special benefit, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
A motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
a predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) suggesting that a bonus will be awarded by displaying an effect video of a character on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the effect video of the character, an action prompting effect (e.g., operation prompting effect) for prompting an action of a player by displaying one of a plurality of action prompting images including a first action prompting image (e.g., operation prompting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action prompting image (e.g., operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action prompting image on the display means, and an indication effect (e.g., a big win indication effect and a miss indication effect) for indicating whether or not a bonus will be awarded based on detection of an action of a player by the action detection means (e.g., an indication effect control CPU 120);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The action prompting effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24 and FIG. 10-25, the part where the action prompting effect is executed during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect),
When the action promotion effect is executed by the first action promotion image, the first action promotion image is displayed while the effect video of the predetermined effect is visibly displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33, when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, an effect image 079SG005E having a transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promotion effect is executed by the second action promotion image, the display means displays the effect video of the predetermined effect in a more difficult to see manner than when the first action promotion image is displayed, while displaying the second action promotion image in a display area larger than the display area of the first action promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, when an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb larger in size than an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so that the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed).
The rate at which a special benefit is awarded when the second action prompting image is displayed is higher than the rate at which the first action prompting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the action prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the action prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of a specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, an effect video of the predetermined effect whose proceeding speed is the second speed while the first action prompting image is being displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), in the case where an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, a portion in which the display of an effect video of a battle effect is executed at a proceeding speed V2 while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined presentation video is displayed at the second speed while the first action promotion image is being displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 29th aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
A first predetermined performance (e.g., a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second predetermined performance (e.g., a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance) can be executed as the predetermined performance, and after execution of a first specific section in the first predetermined performance (e.g., a first reach performance first half execution period and a third reach performance first half execution period), a transition can be made to a second specific section (e.g., a first reach performance second half execution period and a third reach performance second half execution period) subsequent to the first specific section,
The predetermined performance can be executed in a first specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18 or variable display of Super Reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22) in which the first predetermined performance is notified of the grant of a benefit after the first specific section of the first predetermined performance is executed, a second specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α3 shown in FIG. 10-20 and FIG. 10-21 or variable display of Super Reach β3 shown in FIG. 10-24 and FIG. 10-25) in which the first predetermined performance is executed and the second specific section of the first predetermined performance is executed, and a third specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of Super Reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) in which the predetermined performance is terminated after the first predetermined performance and the second specific section of the first predetermined performance are executed,
When transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance, a performance video whose progression speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the portion in which the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2).
With regard to the sound effects corresponding to the predetermined performance, the speed related to the sound effects is output at the same speed in the first and second specific sections of the first predetermined performance and in the second predetermined performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined presentation, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined presentation, but the output speed of the presentation sound corresponding to the predetermined presentation does not change when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined presentation, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined presentation, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation to the second speed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the branching of the predetermined presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the characteristic part 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the present characteristic part 079SG is equipped with a sound synthesis IC 079SG132 that cooperates with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the sound synthesis CI 079SG132, and a sound data ROM 079SG133. The performance control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 based on a performance control command from the main board 11, and causes the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data individually for each speaker 8L, 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 and outputs them to each speaker 8L, 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R, which is associated with sound number data and is used to output sounds corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds. In other words, this control data is a collection of data including sound data that chronologically describes the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period).

Figure 10-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns, reach effects, operation promotion effects and still image display effects described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 079SG005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D that can display the first reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U that can display the second reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, and a caption display area 079SG005T that can display a caption indicating the game status.

In other words, the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb becomes the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are display areas that display information related to the game (reserved display, subtitle display, display of the fourth symbol, and display of the number of reserved memories) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, closer to the first display area 079SG005F. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this characteristic part 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 079SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 079SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a height that is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5, and a left-right width that is the same as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are much shorter than the height H and left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5.

For this reason, in this characteristic part 079SG, the area of the first display region 079SG005F relative to the entire display region of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described below, which allows each pending display to be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), in the caption display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described below, which makes it possible to display a message according to the game status or the performance being performed (for example, if a specific reach performance is in progress, a message according to the status of the performance such as "XX mode in progress!") while moving from left to right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3).

When the characters included in the message corresponding to the game status reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the game status is displayed while moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game status is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T, making it easier for the player to recognize the current game status.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T may each be rotated and moved at different constant speeds.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a regular interval to indicate that the special symbol is being variable displayed. Also, if the variable display result is a miss, both of these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end of the variable display, whereas if the variable display result is a jackpot or miss, both are lit (ON) at the end of the variable display.

The display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the display of the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb are displays that change only when a new reserved memory occurs and when a new variable display starts. In other words, unlike the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T, the display mode of the display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change except when the variable display starts.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figures 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data that is drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (to the left of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display images of chance-up effects, still image display effects, and operation promotion effects, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), image data 3 is data that is drawn to display variable decorative symbols and reach effects in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in Fig. 10-3(A) to Fig. 10-3(C), display priorities are set for these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1, and lowest for image data 3 (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). In other words, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower (lowest layer) than images based on image data 1 and image data 2. Therefore, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over images based on image data 2 and image data 3, as shown in Fig. 10-3(D).

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image at the lowest hierarchical level, and therefore at least a portion of the image based on image data 3 may be difficult to see or impossible to see due to the image based on the first data and the image based on image data 2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images with a constant progression speed, while the images based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images or still images with multiple progression speeds based on data previously stored in the CGROM, as described in detail below.

In particular, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, during the reach performance of a super reach, the video of the reach performance can be displayed at the normal progression speed V1 and at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. This is because data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 and data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store in advance only the data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 in the CGROM, and perform a specified process on that data to make it possible to display part of the performance video of the reach performance at the progression speed V2.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, the video progression speed, which is the speed at which the presentation video changes, is set to V1, resulting in a non-slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a first speed that is fast, and the video progression speed is set to V2, which is slower than V1, resulting in a slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a second speed that is slower. In other words, the slow motion video, which is a presentation video with a slow presentation progress speed in this characteristic part 079SG, may be a video whose video progress speed is slower than the non-slow motion video, which is displayed before the slow motion video and has a video progress speed of V1.

In addition, in this characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach performances is exemplified (see Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the performance video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach performance is the same as the content of the super reach performance shown in Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25, but by executing a super reach performance in which the video progression speed does not change from V1 to V2, in other words, there is no slow motion period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a slow motion period has begun in the super reach performance shown in Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25.

In other words, when a super reach performance is executed in which the content of the performance video is the same but the video progression speed does not change to V2, the performance video with the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention corresponds to a performance video with the same content that is displayed at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, and thus is displayed for a longer period of time than a non-slow motion super reach performance.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, the image progression speed of the effect video is slowed down to create a slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly, and an example is given in which the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R does not change from the playback speed V3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to create a pseudo-slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly by not changing the image progression speed of the effect video (keeping it at V1) and instead speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R and the light emission cycle of game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means, including a display means capable of displaying effect videos, and by making the speed at which the effect is performed by at least one of these effect output means differ between slow motion periods and non-slow motion periods, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect being performed is in slow motion during the slow motion period.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the display of the reach effect video is always executed at a progression speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the progression speed of the display of the reach effect video during the slow motion period may be variable (for example, the progression speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progression speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

Figure 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 079SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 10-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the number of remaining times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this feature part 079SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 079SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 10-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature part 079SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature part 079SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 10-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 079SG will be explained using FIG. 10-7(B). In this feature section 079SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state, and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a jackpot that repeats 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a jackpot that repeats 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "probable chance jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable chance jackpot, and "non-probable chance jackpot" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probable chance jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature part 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or variable probability jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 079SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 10-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 079SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided in the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature part 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small winning".

As shown in Figure 10-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature 079SG. In this feature 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table have different numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5, respectively, and in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 30 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5, respectively. In other words, in this feature part 079SG, when the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the Super Reach β type fluctuation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win jackpot, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation patterns in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 079SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the reach effect of super reach α1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the first reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of super reach α2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of super reach α3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed and then the second reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot probability) is, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the second reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the first reach performance is performed.

The reach effect of Super Reach β1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the third reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and then the fourth reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot), as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the fourth reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the third reach performance is performed.

Note that, in this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the second reach performance is always executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance is always executed after the third reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the second reach performance and the fourth reach performance are executed by themselves.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, an example has been given of a form in which each reach performance can be executed as a combination of the first reach performance and the second reach performance, and as a combination of the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the reach performance is executed in combinations other than these (for example, a combination of the first reach performance and the fourth reach performance, the second reach performance and the third reach performance, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally set to have a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) than the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) may have a lower jackpot expectation rate than any of the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 079SG is provided with a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 079SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 079SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 079SG151C, a game control flag setting section 079SG152, a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 079SG190 as shown in Figure 10-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in Figure 10-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 079SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 079SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made in the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A, and when a start win is made in the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 10-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 079SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 079SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 079SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 079SGS103 or step 079SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 (step 079SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, settings are made to send the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 079SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 079SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the performance control process processing in this feature unit 079SG. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), then updates the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a hold display operation process (step 079SG162) to operate (rotate display) the hold display displayed in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to perform a telop operation display in the telop display area 079SG005T, and executes a fourth pattern display process (step 079SG164) to perform a variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J, and then executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 depending on the value of the performance control process flag.

Figure 10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 9. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a small win, the stopping pattern is determined from among the chance combinations "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a loss, the stopping pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern of three mismatched patterns, a combination other than the chance combinations described above (a loss pattern).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277). If the change pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; Y), the process executes a chance up performance decision process (step 079SGS278) to decide whether to execute a chance up performance in the latter half of the first reach performance or the latter half of the third reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15, if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 20% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 80% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 20% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. In other words, in the variable display of the reach of this feature part 079SG, when the chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the chance up effect is not executed.

In this feature section 079SG, as shown in Figures 10-27 and 10-32, only one presentation pattern is provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple presentation patterns may be provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on which presentation pattern the chance up effect is executed with.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Figures 10-27 and 10-32, there is only one timing for starting the Chance Up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple timings for starting the Chance Up effect may be provided, and the probability of winning may differ depending on which timing the Chance Up effect starts from.

After determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), a still image display effect determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed to determine the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the second reach effect to the start of the notification effect (jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect), and proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 100%, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 80%, and pattern SG-2 with a probability of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), still image display pattern SG-1 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and still image display pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and then the color of the still image is changed.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach presentation is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the still image display presentation is executed with pattern SG-2 (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach α3 in step S079SGS281 (step S079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step S079SGS283. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS281; Y), the process executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step S079SGS282) for determining the presentation pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach presentation, and proceeds to step S079SGS283.

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 80% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 20% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (B), operation promotion presentation pattern SS-1 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and operation promotion presentation pattern SS-2 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in a larger size than pattern SS-1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5.

In other words, as for the operation promotion effect in this characteristic part 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2), there is a higher probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect will be executed) than when a normal-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Therefore, the player can be drawn to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In step 079SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute each of the aforementioned chance-up performances, still image display performances, operation promotion performances, etc., and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the performance pattern and the variable pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 079SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this feature section 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display performance processing is executed, and determines whether the process timer after the subtraction has timed out. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 and Super Reach β1 to β3 in this feature part 079SG will be explained based on Figures 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(G), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of a decorative pattern starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light (blink) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this characteristic part 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinked or lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking or lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Fig. 10-18, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-26(A) to Fig. 10-26(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the first reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α1, when the first reach performance first half execution period ends, as shown in FIG. 10-18 and FIG. 10-26(E) to FIG. 10-26(G), a video of ally character A's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing the part where friendly character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and the animation showing the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and controlling the jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D), ally character A's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the first reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 10-19 and Figure 10-27 (A) to Figure 10-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character A punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 10-19 and Figures 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after friendly character A's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed in which the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination to notify that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), ally character A's attack is successful and defeats enemy character A during the second half of the first reach performance execution period. Then, the game moves to the first half of the second reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the battle performance progresses and the second half of the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance is reached, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21 and 10-28(C), as an effect performance, converging lines start to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video starts, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character A is displayed in slow motion punching enemy character B.

In addition, during the period when the attack of the friendly character A towards the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the moving image of the battle performance in the first display area 079SG005F is moving at a speed of V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at a constant moving speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking period of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking period of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking period becomes faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (D), the number of convergence lines as the effect performance described above is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect video slows down to V2, causing the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F to increase and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 to become more intense. This increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 makes it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, after the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), the image displayed at the end of the battle effect (in this feature 079SG, the image displayed immediately before ally character A's attack hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect.

During the execution of the still image display effect, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 returns to the cycle before the progression speed of the battle effect video slowed to V2.

When pattern SG-2 is determined as the presentation pattern for the still image display presentation, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle presentation is inverted as the still image display presentation, as shown in Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-29(E). After the still image display presentation with the inverted color ends, the jackpot notification presentation is notified that the attack of ally character A hits enemy character B, and that enemy character B will be defeated and then controlled to the jackpot game state. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification presentation, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification presentation is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the animation of friendly character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, while the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. Then, the animation of decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progression speed V1. In particular, when decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not inverted as the still image display effect, and a jackpot notification effect as described above is executed as shown in Figures 10-30(A) to 10-30(D), or a miss notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30(F) to 10-30(H).

In the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the jackpot notification effect is the same as the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the animation of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. After enemy character B falls, it is displayed at a progression speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and effect sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the miss notification effect is that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character A and ally character A falls, the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, the loss notification effect is a video of friendly character A's attack not hitting and being defeated by enemy character B, which is displayed at a progression speed of V1. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4, without any change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

Next, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at regular intervals.

As shown in Fig. 10-22, Fig. 10-23, Fig. 10-31(A) to Fig. 10-31(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the third reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the third reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in Fig. 10-22 and Fig. 10-31 (E) to Fig. 10-31 (G), a video of ally character B's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and images of the jackpot notification performance are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing friendly character B's successful attack is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(E)), and the animation showing the enemy character being defeated thereafter is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and the player being controlled to a jackpot game state is again displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3 variable display, when the first half of the third reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D), ally character B's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the third reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 10-23 and Figure 10-32 (A) to Figure 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach effect execution period begins, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the presentation video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up presentation may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). The chance-up presentation is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the presentation video of the battle effect.

In particular, on the image display device 5, the small symbols are given priority over the chance up effect video, while the chance up effect video is given priority over the decorative symbols (the "7" displayed at the top left and right of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-32 (B)). Therefore, in this feature part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance up effect, the player can recognize that a variable display is being performed by visually checking the small symbols, and by displaying the chance up effect video over the decorative symbols, an area for displaying the chance up effect video on the image display device 5 can be reliably secured.

In this feature section 079SG, the chance-up effect animation is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols may be displayed with priority over the chance-up effect animation. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative symbol combination the currently executing reach effect has developed from, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character B punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach β2, when the execution period of the latter half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 10-23 and Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after ally character B's attack has failed and he has been defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed, indicating that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and in the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, then as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), ally character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated during the second half of the execution period of the third reach performance. Then, the game moves to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the fourth reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C). When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character B punching enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character B towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes faster).

In other words, during the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the speed of the battle effect animation slows down to V2, causing the game effect lamp 9 to blink more intensely, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a big win notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, an operation prompting effect is executed. If the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect is determined to be pattern SS-1, an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba resembling the shape of the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, along with a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B and an effect image 079SG005E. The updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are then started. As mentioned above, these images of the operation prompting effect are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), and are therefore displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the meter 079SG005M is updated to notify the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged and updated. Note that since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transparency (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can see the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation prompting effect is not being executed. Since the execution of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at a progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-34(A) to Fig. 10-34(E), when the presentation pattern of the operation prompting presentation is determined to be pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, which is larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and is an operation prompting image that imitates the shape of the push button 31B, is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is also displayed, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Note that, as described above, these operation prompting presentation images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see Fig. 10-3), and therefore are displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle presentation.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the update display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb conceals most of the image of the battle effect. As mentioned above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image that is larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and has a transparency of 0%. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, or if the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (if the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends), the jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect will be executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation prompting effect ends.

As shown in Fig. 10-24 and Fig. 10-35 (A) to Fig. 10-35 (C), the big win notification effect after the operation promotion effect is a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B, which is displayed at a progressing speed V1, while the video of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progressing speed V2. The video after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progressing speed V1. During the big win notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progressing speed V3, while the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in Fig. 10-25 and Fig. 10-35(E) to Fig. 10-35(G), the miss notification effect after the operation prompting effect is that the attack of ally character B does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after the attack of enemy character B hits ally character B and ally character B falls, it is notified that the game state is not controlled to a jackpot. In particular, when the miss notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, the loss notification effect is a video that is displayed at a speed of V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a speed of V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

As shown in Fig. 10-26(H), Fig. 10-27(H), Fig. 10-29(F), Fig. 10-30(E), Fig. 10-30(I), Fig. 10-31(H), Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-35(D), and Fig. 10-35(H), this characteristic part 079SG illustrates an example in which, at the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T including the caption (message) is displayed on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and, at the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5, but the display of the caption (message) itself in the caption display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, in the variable display of Super Reach α3 and Super Reach β3, an example is given in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened only during the slow motion period immediately prior to the notification effect (the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V2), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately prior to the notification effect. Also, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during part of the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V1 (non-slow motion period).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1, and during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. Therefore, while the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, it is possible to increase the degree of empathy of the player with the ally character displayed during the reach performance and to increase the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first and second half of the first, second, third, and fourth reach performances, the output of background music and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R remains unchanged and is output at the normal playback speed of V4, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output unit in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so that highly reproducible background music (music), sound effects, and other performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume during variable displays, including when reach effects are being performed, and when jackpot games are being played, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half of the second reach effect and during the second half of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than normal, so that the game effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progression speed of the effect video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. In this way, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification performance will be executed soon, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing during the first reach performance to the fourth reach performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the progression speed of the reach performance video changes between V1 and V2, while the rotation speed of the reserved display and the movement speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4, which further prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so that while each reach effect is being executed, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and captions displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than when the reach effect is in progress, the rotation display of the reserved display is performed at a rotation speed V3 in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the moving display of the caption is performed at a moving speed V3 in the caption display area 079SG005T. In other words, the rotation display of the reserved display and the moving display of the caption are performed at the same speed as when the reach effect is in progress, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the reserved display and the caption.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), when the characters contained in the caption (message) in the caption display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, so that the entire caption (message) is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T. This allows the player to always recognize the entire moving display of the caption in the caption display area 079SG005T.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the entire caption is constantly displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be times when part of the caption that is displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T is not visible to the player.

As shown in Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21, and Fig. 10-28, during the second half of the second reach effect, the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2 and an effect effect of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the second half of the second reach effect, and increasing the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 10-28(C) and Fig. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, making it easier for the player to recognize that the second reach effect has ended and a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed due to the increase in the number of concentrated lines displayed.

In this feature section 079SG, an example is given of the effect presentation of the present invention being the display of converging lines, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effects such as the movement of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the output of specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be executed as effect presentations, and the effectiveness of the effect presentations may be successively increased as the second reach presentation (battle presentation) progresses (for example, the movement range of the movable body 32 may be widened, the volume of the specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R may be increased, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself may be increased, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. This further increases the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa, while making it easier for the player to recognize that they are being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory display area 079SG005Sa may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. When the display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T are displayed, an image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, overlapping with the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T).

In addition, at this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T may be made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and only one of the reserved displays displayed in these reserved display areas may be made invisible, thereby improving the visibility of the jackpot notification image.

As shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-29, during the second half of the second reach effect, a still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while as shown in Figs. 10-20 and 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 10-2 (C) continue without stopping. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved display is being displayed or that the telop is being moved during the execution period of the still image display effect, and prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the display of the reserved display or the telop due to the rotation display of the reserved display or the moving display of the telop being stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed using pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted, so that the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by the inversion of the color of the still image.

In this feature section 079SG, as a still image display effect, a form in which the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a form in which the color of the still image is changed may be one in which the color of the still image is changed to black and white, one in which only a portion of the color of the still image is changed, or one in which a new color is added to the still image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed with pattern SG-2, thereby inverting the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, the colors of the pending display and caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, so the player can easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed by comparing the pending display, caption, fourth pattern, etc. displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa with the still image.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, followed by a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, and a pattern in which the variable display ends after the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, resulting in a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display of the performance video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 during the first reach performance or the third reach performance and then transitions to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, or whether or not a notification is given that the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or the third reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 and then the performance is controlled to the jackpot game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24 and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the first half execution period of the third reach performance are executed simultaneously at a progression speed V1, so that it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state due to the progression speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance or the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance being different from the progression speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), in the big win notification performance of the feature 079SG, a video of an enemy character falling down due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is displayed at a progression speed V2, while Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), As shown in FIG. 0-23, FIG. 10-25, FIG. 10-27(E) to FIG. 10-27(G), FIG. 10-30(F) to FIG. 10-30(H), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. 10-35(F), in the miss notification effect, the video of the friendly character falling is displayed at a progression speed of V1, so when the miss notification effect is executed, the video of the miss notification effect is not displayed at a progression speed of V2, which prevents the player from becoming overly dissatisfied and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result of the Super Reach results in a miss notification effect, an example is shown in which the display video of the miss notification effect is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in some of the variable displays of the Super Reach, the display video of the miss notification effect may be displayed at a progression speed V2 that is slower than V1. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the presentation of the miss notification effect, and to increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic section 079SG, the progress speed V1 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the third speed in the present invention, and the progress speed V2 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, when the video display of the reach effect is being executed at a progression speed V2 during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed, so that the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation prompting effect.

In this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the display of the fourth reach effect is executed at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V1 while the operation prompting effect is being executed. Furthermore, a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation prompting effect will be executed before the operation prompting effect is executed may be executed, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V2 while the suggestion effect is being executed.

As the operation prompting effect of this characteristic part 079SG, in addition to the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect effect video at the progression speed V2 is continuously executed, but it does not progress to the notification effect. Furthermore, the same big win notification effect or miss notification effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B and when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the notification effect will not be executed before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B due to the player not operating the push button.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is given in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be an operating means other than the push button 31B, such as a stick controller 31A, or a sensor capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or touch sensor.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification presentation in this feature section 079SG, the animation of the part where the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. In contrast, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10-30(G), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), the animation of the miss notification effect of this feature 079SG is displayed at a progression speed of V1 and is not displayed at a progression speed of V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at a progression speed of V2, so that the player can be impressed that the big win game state is being controlled.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which the color is inverted) as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result in this invention is a jackpot, so that the player can be drawn to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect is inverted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, in this feature section 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention may be an effect other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, or an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion presentation of this characteristic part 079SG can be executed in either of two presentation patterns: pattern SS-1, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and pattern SS-2, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb that is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion image that imitates push button 31B. When the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is visible through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, whereas when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the majority of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba, so the visibility of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, so that the player can pay attention to whether the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation promotion effect, the display of the battle effect video is executed at a progression speed V2 while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is being displayed, which can increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb reduces the visibility of the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) that is being displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) completely invisible. Also, during the period in which the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the dedicated background image for the operation prompting effect pattern SS-2, the display of the fourth reach effect's performance video may be executed at a progression speed V1 (non-slow motion).

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as the reach performance of the super reach, the second reach performance can be executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance can be executed after the third reach performance. Furthermore, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the first reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, and the variable display of the super reach β2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the third reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, It is possible to execute variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the second reach performance after the out-exchange part execution period, and variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the fourth reach performance after the third reach performance exchange part execution period. As shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, When transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, Since background music and sound effects are output from 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period. Furthermore, the display of the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, making it easier for the player to recognize the branching of the reach performances that he or she is drawing.

Note that, in the variable display of the Super Reach of this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which two reach effects can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the Super Reach may be capable of executing three or more reach effects, or may be capable of executing only one reach effect.

The features 079SG of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance are provided as the reach performance of the super reach, and in all of these reach performances, a form in which a part of the performance video of the reach performance is displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2 in each reach performance (a pattern in which the performance video is always displayed at the progression speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the performance content may be different between the reach performance in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 and the reach performance in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the sound effects output from speakers 8L, 8R are always output at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the performance video is being executed at the progression speed V2 or not; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as modified example 079SG-1, in the first half of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output from speakers 8L, 8R at playback speed V4, the same as in the execution period of the first half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5, which is slower than playback speed V4). By doing this, the playback speed of the sound effects can be changed while the reach effect video is being displayed at the progression speed V2, improving the effect of the sound effects on the reach effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIG. 10-33 and FIG. 10-34, while it is possible to reduce the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the reach performance by displaying the effect image 079SG005E or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in cases where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this manner, as shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37, after the reach effect ends, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second reach performance is being executed, once the second reach performance ends along with the still image display performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 10-36(E) and FIG. 10-36(F).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, when the player operates the push button 31B, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, or a miss notification effect will notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 10-37(E) and FIG. 10-37(F).

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on image data 2 shown in Figure 10-3 (B), and by expanding the drawing range as an image based on image data 2, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while as shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect after the end of the second reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and Since the visibility of the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, the change in visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect will be displayed, and since the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty recognizing the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, etc.

In addition, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, thereby changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F. Therefore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, without changing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to precisely reduce the visibility of only 079SG005F, and because the rendering of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data is performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced, making it possible to make it difficult for the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb to change.

In addition, in this modified example 079SG-2, an example is shown in which the operation prompting effect is executed during the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed as part of the notification effect.

When the operation prompting effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in Fig. 10-38(A) to Fig. 10-38(F) as modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea in the same manner as modified example 079SG-2. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea has spread to cover the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in Fig. 10-38(D), the operation prompting effect is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect, with an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M.

The operation prompt image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M can be displayed as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), thereby avoiding reduced visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After this, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state or that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state based on whether the player operates the push button 31B or the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as images of the first image data is not reduced, so the operation prompting effect can be made to stand out against the fourth reach effect, effectively encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the jackpot type of the jackpot may always be a variable jackpot (or even a variable jackpot A, which is the most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, a revival effect may be executed that notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot state again after a miss notification effect is executed. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type may be a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot (a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-probability variable jackpot and a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a probability variable jackpot). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a message indicating the game status is displayed as the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be a message indicating whether or not a variable display that is being executed or a variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game status, the title of the reach performance that is being executed, etc.

In addition, the characteristic section 079SG has been exemplified as a form in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the currently executing presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be one that can identify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result in the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), an explanation of the currently executing presentation (particularly a reach presentation), a preview presentation that can be executed from a timing prior to a reach presentation, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given of a form in which an operation prompting effect (display of operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) is executed during a period in which the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed after the reach effect video returns from a progression speed V2 to a progression speed V1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-34, an example of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. As an operation prompting effect, it is not necessary to simply display an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb. For example, as a preliminary effect to displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, an effect may be executed in which the images of multiple push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped to display the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb.

When the effect of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B moving toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation prompting effect, for example, the speed of the movement display of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B may be slowed down as they approach the center of the image display device 5. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 may be different from when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in multiple colors, while when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing this, when the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, a sense of unity can be given to the display of the reach effect video and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 10-26, Fig. 10-29, Fig. 10-30, Fig. 10-31, and Fig. 10-35, the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation is exemplified as a form in which the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot after the end of the reach presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for displaying the decorative symbols while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot may be during the reach presentation.

The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that allows the player to select at least a portion of the sound effects, such as background music, to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R during play by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In this way, if the player sets the output of sound effects to suit his/her preferences, when the video display of each reach effect is being executed at the progression speed V1, the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R will be played back at the playback speed V4 without changing, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the sound effects being played back at a speed slower than the playback speed V4, even if the player himself/herself has selected the sound effects to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as an end indication effect in the present invention, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character can be executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, and when this effect is executed, the variable display result is always a miss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the display on the image display device 5 may be temporarily switched to the normal background image display before the reach effect, and then an effect indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect) may be executed.

When executing the revival effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked before the video of the revival effect is displayed on the image display device 5, to make the player aware that the revival effect is being executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode of the revival effect may be, for example, an ally character attacking the enemy character again and defeating the enemy character. In particular, when executing the revival effect, a part of the video of the revival effect (for example, a video of a scene in which the enemy character is defeated) may be displayed at a progression speed V2 to enhance the presentation effect of the revival effect.

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the probability of winning can be changed by changing the setting value as shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 9. In this case, for example, a pattern may be set in which the variable display result is a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1, and when a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 may be a miss at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 can be used as an indication that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention to the variable display result being a miss while suppressing a decrease in the player's interest due to the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13), display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying effect videos, effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) that displays an effect video of a character on the display means and outputs an effect sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the character effect video, and a pseudo-movable body display that moves from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position. the pseudo-movable body display means being capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body at a first position, a movable body being movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position, and a movable body performance execution means being capable of executing a performance relating to the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body, the performance execution means being capable of displaying on the display means a performance video in which the progression speed of the performance is a first speed during a first period of the predetermined performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, a portion in which the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1 during the respective first half execution periods of a first reach performance, a second reach performance, a third reach performance, and a fourth reach performance), and a performance video in which the progression speed of the performance is a second speed slower than the first speed during a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period. A video image can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video image of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V2), and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance can be output by the sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period and the latter half execution period of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM, performance sound, etc. can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a normal playback speed of V4). a portion that is outputted from the speaker 8L, 8R), the presentation sound corresponding to the predetermined presentation includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion that can output background music (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R), the movable body presentation execution means is capable of executing a pseudo movable body display presentation that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body presentation that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and a gaming machine in which the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation are executed by the movable body presentation execution means in a predetermined period of time is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than a gaming machine in which the movable body presentation execution means executes the pseudo movable body display presentation without executing the movable body presentation in the predetermined period of time.

With this configuration, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the specified effect does not change between the first and second periods, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the effect sound, which includes music and sound effects, can increase interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the sound effects corresponding to the specified effects, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player, and since the player will pay attention to the effects when the pseudo moving body display effect is executed in the hope that a moving body effect will be executed, the interest of the effects can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player when installed in an amusement center and is likely to attract the player's interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that is unlikely to give a player a sense of incongruity in the presentation and that can draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo-movable body display presentation, there is provided a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, comprising: a pseudo-movable body display means that can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position; a movable body that can be moved from the first position to the second position different from the first position; and a movable body presentation execution means that can execute a presentation related to the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body; The movable body performance execution means is capable of executing a pseudo movable body display performance that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and when the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period, the proportion of the game machine being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. Below, an example of an example of the form of these game machines will be described as another example of the form.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A pseudo-movable body display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 14-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A pseudo-movable body display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The pseudo-movable body display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position);
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 14-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A pseudo-movable body display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance during the predetermined period without executing the movable body performance (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 14-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form A4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A pseudo-movable body display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The pseudo movable object display means
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, after the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is made non-displayed without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 14-26(A) to (J) and Fig. 14-27(A));
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is made invisible, the notification-related image (e.g., character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figs. 14-26(F) to (J), Fig. 14-27(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, whereas in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a pseudo-movable body display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The pseudo movable object display means
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 14-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A pseudo-movable body display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The pseudo movable object display means
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to 14-40(C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 14-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image, making a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The device is provided with a pseudo-movable body display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 14-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 14-16(C) );
The pseudo movable object display means
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to (C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to 14-40(C));
The speed of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is different from the speed of the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See FIG. 14-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or a pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or a pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See FIG. 14-10 and FIG. 14-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 14-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 14-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 14-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A8,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIGS. 14-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A10 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A9,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position earlier than the performance display unit (see FIG. 14-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 14-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A11,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 14-39(A) );
The movement display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The pseudo-movable body display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 14-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The pseudo movable body display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 14-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to aspect A13 or A14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the pseudo-movable body display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, it performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 14-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A17,
The pseudo-movable body display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 14-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
The pseudo-movable body display means is capable of, after moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 14-43 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 11 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 11 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 11 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "jackpot" or "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the gambling nature excessively high. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-1 to 14-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination (big win type determination result) of which of several types of big win types the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win".

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the number of times remaining for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 14-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 14-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in a high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in a high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning entry is made to the first start winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning entry reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning entry is made to the second start winning entry, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning entry is made, the start winning entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 14-9. Fig. 14-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 14-12. Fig. 14-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 14-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the developer wants them to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 14-13. Fig. 14-13 (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining a state in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 14-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a rotating shaft 205L, 205R facing in the vertical direction and having the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see Figure 14-2) built into the performance unit 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting unit 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see Figure 14-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 14-14. Fig. 14-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 14-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 14-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 14-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 14-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by two-dot chain lines in Figure 14-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 14-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 14-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D that correspond to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and can be changed between a first performance display state that corresponds to the first performance state, and a second performance display state that corresponds to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 14-15. Fig. 14-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 14-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 14-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 14-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 14-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development, but due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made capable of executing a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 14-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance unit M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical unit M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 14-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 14-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 14-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 14-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 14-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 14-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A to M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 14-16 (C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 14-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 14-16 and 14-17. Figure 14-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 14-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in Figures 14-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 14-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display something that is partially different from the model movable body, or to display something that cannot be achieved with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 14-10. Figure 14-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 14-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 14-34 (A) to (C)).Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 14-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 14-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 14-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 14-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead, the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 14-26 (A) to (J), Figure 14-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated tapping operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby announcing that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 14-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that has been executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and is defeated by the enemy character, and the player loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 14-29 (E) to (G), Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 14-11. Figure 14-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 14-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 14-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 14-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 14-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 14-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 14-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 14-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 14-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 14-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 14-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 14-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 14-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command specifies whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command specifies whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 14-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure-win (sure-win A, sure-win B, or sure-win C), when it is a non-sure-win, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (A) are the numbers.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command specifies whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command specifies whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 14-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 14-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-23 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "no execution". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach misses or normal reach misses, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the final performance using the final performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined final performance type is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the final performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which enable the operation of the push button 31B and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once, and for "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which enable the operation of the stick controller 31A and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 14-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on FIG. 14-25 to FIG. 14-31. FIG. 14-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. FIG. 14-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 14-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 14-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 14-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach performance. FIG. 14-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. FIG. 14-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 14-25(E), the light-emitting display units Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A, thereby executing the preview performance A that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, an effect image Z60 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 14-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 14-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on to drop the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 14-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 14-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 14-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 14-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not to display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26 (J) in FIG. 14-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more effectively building up anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 14-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 14-27 (D) are different from the development suggestion effect and do not indicate the probability of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors corresponding to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc. displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (not displayed) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 14-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C). On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the object of operation is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push button 31B is pressed (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the stick controller 31A is pulled (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push button 31B or the pull of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 14-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 14-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 14-31.

As shown in FIG. 14-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 14-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 14-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 14-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then hidden for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then turned off for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 14-30(E), it moves and displays them to the first performance display position and then erases them. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop notification of a confirmed miss. Also, in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination, the small patterns are displayed as the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 14-33 to Fig. 14-34. Fig. 14-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 14-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 14-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 14-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-34(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 14-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 14-35 to Fig. 14-40. Fig. 14-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 14-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are the same downward direction. In other words, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in Figures 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2 > L1).

As shown in Figures 14-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 14-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 14-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 14-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 14-28 to 14-30, the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period of the deciding performance (ta0 to ta10) to notify of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can give the player a surprise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during the first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during the second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 14-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 14-40.

As shown in Figures 14-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 14-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and increasing the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 14-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a comparison of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 with the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison of the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave an impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be a comparison of the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison of the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is of the amount of movement between the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then made invisible. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then made invisible without moving and displaying it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved from the second performance display position to the second performance display position is executed in the preview performance B and when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, the fact that the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs when pattern PBY-3, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or pattern PBY-4, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position, includes cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-41. Fig. 14-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 14-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position during a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 14-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-42. Fig. 14-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and a second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed in a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 14-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 14-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 14-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 14-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-43. Fig. 14-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 14-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 14-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is exemplified as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. In this way, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted by utilizing the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, when the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this and various other effects can be applied. In addition, although these various effects can be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative front-to-back positions of each other, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
determining whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state and a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
The display means can be used to variably display decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information,
A predetermined reach can be executed using the display means,
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined reach is
A reach in which a predetermined effect video is displayed on the display means,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The predetermined effect video is a video in which the effect progresses at a predetermined speed by changing the effect image at the predetermined speed,
The predetermined speed includes a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed,
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the first speed can be displayed during the first period, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the second speed can be displayed during the second period, and the predetermined effect video of a first predetermined scene to be controlled to the advantageous state can be displayed at the second speed during the third period,
When the second command is received, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the first speed can be displayed during the first period, the predetermined effect video in the effect mode progressing at the second speed can be displayed during the second period, and the predetermined effect video of a second predetermined scene not controlled to the advantageous state can be displayed at the first speed during the third period,
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A special effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
In the display means , a pseudo-movable object display effect can be executed in which the special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from a special first display position to a special second display position, and the special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the special first display position to the special second display position,
A movable body performance in which the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position can be executed,
The light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
In the second period, the light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than that of the first period,
The display means includes:
When the special pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the special first display position to the special second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the special second display position to the special first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the special second display position;
When the special pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the special first display position to the special second display position, and then moved from the special second display position to the special first display position before being hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by: